controllogix-xt controlnet interface module … · controllogix-xt controlnet interface module...
TRANSCRIPT
Installation Instructions
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Catalog Number 1756-CN2RXT
Topic PageImportant User Information 2
About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module 6
About ControlLogix-XT Systems 8
ControlLogix-XT with Traditional ControlLogix Components 8
Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control 9
Example Redundant ControlLogix-XT System 10
Before You Begin 10
Parts 11
Set the Modulersquos Network Address 11
Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings 12
Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation 13
Determine the Module Slot Location 13
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) 14
Install the ControlNet Module 14
Connect the Module to the Network 16
Remove the Module 19
Install the EDS File 20
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port 21
Set Up the USB Driver 22
Status Indicators 23
Module Status Indicator and Display 23
Channel Status Indicators 29
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT 31
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT 32
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT 34
Additional Resources 35
2 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Important User Information
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable
In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual
Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited
Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations
WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product
ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences
Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present
Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures
SHOCK HAZARD
BURN HAZARD
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 3
Environment and Enclosure
ATTENTION This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC 60664-1) at altitudes up to 2000 m (6562 ft) without derating
This equipment is considered Group 1 Class A industrial equipment according to IECCISPR 11 Without appropriate precautions there may be difficulties with electromagnetic compatibility in residential and other environments due to conducted and radiated disturbances
This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA V2 V1 V0 (or equivalent) if non-metallic The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications
In addition to this publication see
bull Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for additional installation requirements Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41
bull NEMA Standards 250 and IEC 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
4 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
North American Hazardous Location ApprovalThe following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations
Informations sur lutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux
Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest T number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation
Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent quagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque didentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons deacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de linstallation
WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD -bull Do not disconnect equipment
unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2
bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous
AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION ndash bull Couper le courant ou sassurer
que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement
bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit
bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2
bull Sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 5
European Hazardous Location Approval
European Zone 2 Certification (The following applies when the product bears the Ex or EEx Marking)
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 949EC and has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0
WARNING bull This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments
bull This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Allen-Bradley
bull Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40 when applied in Zone 2 environments
bull This equipment must be used only with ATEX certified backplanes
bull Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
ATTENTION
This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
6 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet ModuleConfigure and use the 1756-CN2RXT module as you would a traditional 1756-CN2RB module For more information about configuring and using the 1756-CN2RXT and 1756-CN2RB modules see the ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment
bull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static
bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap
bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards
bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment
bull Use a static-safe workstation if available
bull Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 7
Features of the 1756-CN2RXT Module
These are the hardware features of the 1756-CN2RXT module
Item Description
1 Module status display - an alphanumeric display that indicates module status
2 Status indicators that show channel and module status
3 USB port for temporary connection
4 Channel A BNC connector
5 Channel B BNC connector
6 Backplane connector
00 - Factory Reseton Power Up(Invalid Network Address)
01 - 99 Normal Operation(Valid Network Address)
12
3
45
6
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
About ControlLogix-XT SystemsThe ControlLogix-XT products include control and communication system components that when used with FLEX IO-XT products provide a complete control system solution that can be used in environments where temperatures range from -2070 degC (-4158 degF)
When used independently the ControlLogix-XT system can withstand environments where the temperature ranges from -2570 degC (-13158 degF)
ControlLogix-XT with Traditional ControlLogix Components
For more information about standard ControlLogix component specifications and installation requirements see the resources listed in the Additional Resources table on page 35
IMPORTANT ControlLogix-XT system components are rated for extreme environmental conditions only when used properly with other Logix-XT system components The use of ControlLogix-XT components with traditional ControlLogix system components nullifies extreme-environment ratings
If a ControlLogix-XT module is used with traditional ControlLogix products that is ControlLogix products not designed for extreme environments the ControlLogix-XT module can withstand only the environments specified for the traditional ControlLogix version of the module For example if a 1756-CN2RXT module is used in a traditional 1756-A10 chassis the 1756-CN2RXT module can withstand only the environment specified for the traditional 1756-CN2RB module
The ControlLogix-XT system components are designed to meet the same and greater operational and environmental requirements as traditional ControlLogix products
When a ControlLogix-XT component is used as a replacement for a traditional ControlLogix component the functional and environmental requirements of the traditional ControlLogix component apply
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 9
Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant ControlYou can use the 1756-CN2RXT modules either in standalone or redundant configurations
A standalone configuration uses
bull one control chassis that contains the 1756-CN2RXT and the 1756-L63XT controller
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
A redundant configuration uses
bull two controller chassis called the redundant chassis pair Each chassis of the pair must contain at least these modules
ndash 1756-L63XT controller
ndash 1756-CN2RXT ControlNet module
ndash 1756-RMXT redundancy module
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
For more information about redundancy control refer to the ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
IMPORTANT If you are using the 1756-CN2RXT in a redundant system these hardware considerations must be made
bull Each redundant chassis of the pair must be configured with identical modules placed in identical slots These module pairings between the two chassis are called partners
bull All partner modules in redundant chassis pairs must be at the same firmware revision
bull For ControlNet module partners the ControlNet network address must be the same for each module of the pair
bull These modules cannot be used in redundant chassis pairs that contain 1756-CN2RXT modules
ndash 1756-DHRIOXT or 1756-DHRIO
ndash 1756-SRM
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Example Redundant ControlLogix-XT System
This example of a redundant ControlLogix-XT system shows the chassis components listed in this table
Before You BeginBefore you install your module complete these tasks
bull Obtain Appropriate Parts page 11
bull Set the Modulersquos Network Address page 11
bull Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation page 13
bull Determine the Module Slot Location page 13
This chassis Contains these modules
Primary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Secondary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
Redundant ControlNet Media
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 11
PartsTo use your ControlNet module you need these system components
Set the Modulersquos Network AddressUse a small screwdriver to set the modulersquos network address switches For modules in a standalone chassis you must specify a unique ControlNet network address You can select an address of 0199 for modules in a standalone chassis Address 00 is an invalid ControlNet address
This example shows the network address switches set to 23
XTX
TXTX
TXT
-1756-CN2RXT
1756-A5XT or 1756-A7LXT1756-PBXT
1786-TPR 1786-TPS 1786-TPYR or 1786-TPYS
Top of Module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Reset the Module to the Original Factory SettingsIf you need to reset the module to its original settings and clear all keeper information complete the following steps
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Reset the switches to 00
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassis
6 After the module status display reads lsquoReset Complete-Change Switch Settingsrsquo remove power from the chassis
7 Remove the module from the chassis
8 Set the switches to their final value
9 Replace the module in the chassis
10 Apply power to the chassis
IMPORTANT The following procedure instructs you to remove power from the chassis before removing the module This is only necessary if the module is in a Class I Division 2 hazardous location For more information see Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) on page 14
IMPORTANT Do not use the 00 switch setting during normal module operation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
2 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Important User Information
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable
In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual
Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited
Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations
WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product
ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences
Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present
Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures
SHOCK HAZARD
BURN HAZARD
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 3
Environment and Enclosure
ATTENTION This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC 60664-1) at altitudes up to 2000 m (6562 ft) without derating
This equipment is considered Group 1 Class A industrial equipment according to IECCISPR 11 Without appropriate precautions there may be difficulties with electromagnetic compatibility in residential and other environments due to conducted and radiated disturbances
This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA V2 V1 V0 (or equivalent) if non-metallic The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications
In addition to this publication see
bull Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for additional installation requirements Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41
bull NEMA Standards 250 and IEC 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
4 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
North American Hazardous Location ApprovalThe following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations
Informations sur lutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux
Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest T number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation
Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent quagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque didentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons deacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de linstallation
WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD -bull Do not disconnect equipment
unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2
bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous
AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION ndash bull Couper le courant ou sassurer
que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement
bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit
bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2
bull Sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 5
European Hazardous Location Approval
European Zone 2 Certification (The following applies when the product bears the Ex or EEx Marking)
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 949EC and has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0
WARNING bull This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments
bull This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Allen-Bradley
bull Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40 when applied in Zone 2 environments
bull This equipment must be used only with ATEX certified backplanes
bull Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
ATTENTION
This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
6 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet ModuleConfigure and use the 1756-CN2RXT module as you would a traditional 1756-CN2RB module For more information about configuring and using the 1756-CN2RXT and 1756-CN2RB modules see the ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment
bull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static
bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap
bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards
bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment
bull Use a static-safe workstation if available
bull Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 7
Features of the 1756-CN2RXT Module
These are the hardware features of the 1756-CN2RXT module
Item Description
1 Module status display - an alphanumeric display that indicates module status
2 Status indicators that show channel and module status
3 USB port for temporary connection
4 Channel A BNC connector
5 Channel B BNC connector
6 Backplane connector
00 - Factory Reseton Power Up(Invalid Network Address)
01 - 99 Normal Operation(Valid Network Address)
12
3
45
6
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
About ControlLogix-XT SystemsThe ControlLogix-XT products include control and communication system components that when used with FLEX IO-XT products provide a complete control system solution that can be used in environments where temperatures range from -2070 degC (-4158 degF)
When used independently the ControlLogix-XT system can withstand environments where the temperature ranges from -2570 degC (-13158 degF)
ControlLogix-XT with Traditional ControlLogix Components
For more information about standard ControlLogix component specifications and installation requirements see the resources listed in the Additional Resources table on page 35
IMPORTANT ControlLogix-XT system components are rated for extreme environmental conditions only when used properly with other Logix-XT system components The use of ControlLogix-XT components with traditional ControlLogix system components nullifies extreme-environment ratings
If a ControlLogix-XT module is used with traditional ControlLogix products that is ControlLogix products not designed for extreme environments the ControlLogix-XT module can withstand only the environments specified for the traditional ControlLogix version of the module For example if a 1756-CN2RXT module is used in a traditional 1756-A10 chassis the 1756-CN2RXT module can withstand only the environment specified for the traditional 1756-CN2RB module
The ControlLogix-XT system components are designed to meet the same and greater operational and environmental requirements as traditional ControlLogix products
When a ControlLogix-XT component is used as a replacement for a traditional ControlLogix component the functional and environmental requirements of the traditional ControlLogix component apply
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 9
Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant ControlYou can use the 1756-CN2RXT modules either in standalone or redundant configurations
A standalone configuration uses
bull one control chassis that contains the 1756-CN2RXT and the 1756-L63XT controller
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
A redundant configuration uses
bull two controller chassis called the redundant chassis pair Each chassis of the pair must contain at least these modules
ndash 1756-L63XT controller
ndash 1756-CN2RXT ControlNet module
ndash 1756-RMXT redundancy module
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
For more information about redundancy control refer to the ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
IMPORTANT If you are using the 1756-CN2RXT in a redundant system these hardware considerations must be made
bull Each redundant chassis of the pair must be configured with identical modules placed in identical slots These module pairings between the two chassis are called partners
bull All partner modules in redundant chassis pairs must be at the same firmware revision
bull For ControlNet module partners the ControlNet network address must be the same for each module of the pair
bull These modules cannot be used in redundant chassis pairs that contain 1756-CN2RXT modules
ndash 1756-DHRIOXT or 1756-DHRIO
ndash 1756-SRM
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Example Redundant ControlLogix-XT System
This example of a redundant ControlLogix-XT system shows the chassis components listed in this table
Before You BeginBefore you install your module complete these tasks
bull Obtain Appropriate Parts page 11
bull Set the Modulersquos Network Address page 11
bull Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation page 13
bull Determine the Module Slot Location page 13
This chassis Contains these modules
Primary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Secondary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
Redundant ControlNet Media
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 11
PartsTo use your ControlNet module you need these system components
Set the Modulersquos Network AddressUse a small screwdriver to set the modulersquos network address switches For modules in a standalone chassis you must specify a unique ControlNet network address You can select an address of 0199 for modules in a standalone chassis Address 00 is an invalid ControlNet address
This example shows the network address switches set to 23
XTX
TXTX
TXT
-1756-CN2RXT
1756-A5XT or 1756-A7LXT1756-PBXT
1786-TPR 1786-TPS 1786-TPYR or 1786-TPYS
Top of Module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Reset the Module to the Original Factory SettingsIf you need to reset the module to its original settings and clear all keeper information complete the following steps
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Reset the switches to 00
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassis
6 After the module status display reads lsquoReset Complete-Change Switch Settingsrsquo remove power from the chassis
7 Remove the module from the chassis
8 Set the switches to their final value
9 Replace the module in the chassis
10 Apply power to the chassis
IMPORTANT The following procedure instructs you to remove power from the chassis before removing the module This is only necessary if the module is in a Class I Division 2 hazardous location For more information see Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) on page 14
IMPORTANT Do not use the 00 switch setting during normal module operation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 3
Environment and Enclosure
ATTENTION This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC 60664-1) at altitudes up to 2000 m (6562 ft) without derating
This equipment is considered Group 1 Class A industrial equipment according to IECCISPR 11 Without appropriate precautions there may be difficulties with electromagnetic compatibility in residential and other environments due to conducted and radiated disturbances
This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA V2 V1 V0 (or equivalent) if non-metallic The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications
In addition to this publication see
bull Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for additional installation requirements Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41
bull NEMA Standards 250 and IEC 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
4 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
North American Hazardous Location ApprovalThe following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations
Informations sur lutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux
Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest T number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation
Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent quagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque didentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons deacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de linstallation
WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD -bull Do not disconnect equipment
unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2
bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous
AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION ndash bull Couper le courant ou sassurer
que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement
bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit
bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2
bull Sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 5
European Hazardous Location Approval
European Zone 2 Certification (The following applies when the product bears the Ex or EEx Marking)
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 949EC and has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0
WARNING bull This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments
bull This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Allen-Bradley
bull Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40 when applied in Zone 2 environments
bull This equipment must be used only with ATEX certified backplanes
bull Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
ATTENTION
This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
6 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet ModuleConfigure and use the 1756-CN2RXT module as you would a traditional 1756-CN2RB module For more information about configuring and using the 1756-CN2RXT and 1756-CN2RB modules see the ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment
bull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static
bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap
bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards
bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment
bull Use a static-safe workstation if available
bull Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 7
Features of the 1756-CN2RXT Module
These are the hardware features of the 1756-CN2RXT module
Item Description
1 Module status display - an alphanumeric display that indicates module status
2 Status indicators that show channel and module status
3 USB port for temporary connection
4 Channel A BNC connector
5 Channel B BNC connector
6 Backplane connector
00 - Factory Reseton Power Up(Invalid Network Address)
01 - 99 Normal Operation(Valid Network Address)
12
3
45
6
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
About ControlLogix-XT SystemsThe ControlLogix-XT products include control and communication system components that when used with FLEX IO-XT products provide a complete control system solution that can be used in environments where temperatures range from -2070 degC (-4158 degF)
When used independently the ControlLogix-XT system can withstand environments where the temperature ranges from -2570 degC (-13158 degF)
ControlLogix-XT with Traditional ControlLogix Components
For more information about standard ControlLogix component specifications and installation requirements see the resources listed in the Additional Resources table on page 35
IMPORTANT ControlLogix-XT system components are rated for extreme environmental conditions only when used properly with other Logix-XT system components The use of ControlLogix-XT components with traditional ControlLogix system components nullifies extreme-environment ratings
If a ControlLogix-XT module is used with traditional ControlLogix products that is ControlLogix products not designed for extreme environments the ControlLogix-XT module can withstand only the environments specified for the traditional ControlLogix version of the module For example if a 1756-CN2RXT module is used in a traditional 1756-A10 chassis the 1756-CN2RXT module can withstand only the environment specified for the traditional 1756-CN2RB module
The ControlLogix-XT system components are designed to meet the same and greater operational and environmental requirements as traditional ControlLogix products
When a ControlLogix-XT component is used as a replacement for a traditional ControlLogix component the functional and environmental requirements of the traditional ControlLogix component apply
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 9
Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant ControlYou can use the 1756-CN2RXT modules either in standalone or redundant configurations
A standalone configuration uses
bull one control chassis that contains the 1756-CN2RXT and the 1756-L63XT controller
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
A redundant configuration uses
bull two controller chassis called the redundant chassis pair Each chassis of the pair must contain at least these modules
ndash 1756-L63XT controller
ndash 1756-CN2RXT ControlNet module
ndash 1756-RMXT redundancy module
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
For more information about redundancy control refer to the ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
IMPORTANT If you are using the 1756-CN2RXT in a redundant system these hardware considerations must be made
bull Each redundant chassis of the pair must be configured with identical modules placed in identical slots These module pairings between the two chassis are called partners
bull All partner modules in redundant chassis pairs must be at the same firmware revision
bull For ControlNet module partners the ControlNet network address must be the same for each module of the pair
bull These modules cannot be used in redundant chassis pairs that contain 1756-CN2RXT modules
ndash 1756-DHRIOXT or 1756-DHRIO
ndash 1756-SRM
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Example Redundant ControlLogix-XT System
This example of a redundant ControlLogix-XT system shows the chassis components listed in this table
Before You BeginBefore you install your module complete these tasks
bull Obtain Appropriate Parts page 11
bull Set the Modulersquos Network Address page 11
bull Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation page 13
bull Determine the Module Slot Location page 13
This chassis Contains these modules
Primary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Secondary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
Redundant ControlNet Media
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 11
PartsTo use your ControlNet module you need these system components
Set the Modulersquos Network AddressUse a small screwdriver to set the modulersquos network address switches For modules in a standalone chassis you must specify a unique ControlNet network address You can select an address of 0199 for modules in a standalone chassis Address 00 is an invalid ControlNet address
This example shows the network address switches set to 23
XTX
TXTX
TXT
-1756-CN2RXT
1756-A5XT or 1756-A7LXT1756-PBXT
1786-TPR 1786-TPS 1786-TPYR or 1786-TPYS
Top of Module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Reset the Module to the Original Factory SettingsIf you need to reset the module to its original settings and clear all keeper information complete the following steps
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Reset the switches to 00
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassis
6 After the module status display reads lsquoReset Complete-Change Switch Settingsrsquo remove power from the chassis
7 Remove the module from the chassis
8 Set the switches to their final value
9 Replace the module in the chassis
10 Apply power to the chassis
IMPORTANT The following procedure instructs you to remove power from the chassis before removing the module This is only necessary if the module is in a Class I Division 2 hazardous location For more information see Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) on page 14
IMPORTANT Do not use the 00 switch setting during normal module operation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
4 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
North American Hazardous Location ApprovalThe following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations
Informations sur lutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux
Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest T number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation
Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent quagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque didentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons deacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de linstallation
WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD -bull Do not disconnect equipment
unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2
bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous
AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION ndash bull Couper le courant ou sassurer
que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement
bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit
bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2
bull Sassurer que lenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 5
European Hazardous Location Approval
European Zone 2 Certification (The following applies when the product bears the Ex or EEx Marking)
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 949EC and has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0
WARNING bull This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments
bull This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Allen-Bradley
bull Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40 when applied in Zone 2 environments
bull This equipment must be used only with ATEX certified backplanes
bull Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
ATTENTION
This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
6 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet ModuleConfigure and use the 1756-CN2RXT module as you would a traditional 1756-CN2RB module For more information about configuring and using the 1756-CN2RXT and 1756-CN2RB modules see the ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment
bull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static
bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap
bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards
bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment
bull Use a static-safe workstation if available
bull Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 7
Features of the 1756-CN2RXT Module
These are the hardware features of the 1756-CN2RXT module
Item Description
1 Module status display - an alphanumeric display that indicates module status
2 Status indicators that show channel and module status
3 USB port for temporary connection
4 Channel A BNC connector
5 Channel B BNC connector
6 Backplane connector
00 - Factory Reseton Power Up(Invalid Network Address)
01 - 99 Normal Operation(Valid Network Address)
12
3
45
6
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
About ControlLogix-XT SystemsThe ControlLogix-XT products include control and communication system components that when used with FLEX IO-XT products provide a complete control system solution that can be used in environments where temperatures range from -2070 degC (-4158 degF)
When used independently the ControlLogix-XT system can withstand environments where the temperature ranges from -2570 degC (-13158 degF)
ControlLogix-XT with Traditional ControlLogix Components
For more information about standard ControlLogix component specifications and installation requirements see the resources listed in the Additional Resources table on page 35
IMPORTANT ControlLogix-XT system components are rated for extreme environmental conditions only when used properly with other Logix-XT system components The use of ControlLogix-XT components with traditional ControlLogix system components nullifies extreme-environment ratings
If a ControlLogix-XT module is used with traditional ControlLogix products that is ControlLogix products not designed for extreme environments the ControlLogix-XT module can withstand only the environments specified for the traditional ControlLogix version of the module For example if a 1756-CN2RXT module is used in a traditional 1756-A10 chassis the 1756-CN2RXT module can withstand only the environment specified for the traditional 1756-CN2RB module
The ControlLogix-XT system components are designed to meet the same and greater operational and environmental requirements as traditional ControlLogix products
When a ControlLogix-XT component is used as a replacement for a traditional ControlLogix component the functional and environmental requirements of the traditional ControlLogix component apply
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 9
Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant ControlYou can use the 1756-CN2RXT modules either in standalone or redundant configurations
A standalone configuration uses
bull one control chassis that contains the 1756-CN2RXT and the 1756-L63XT controller
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
A redundant configuration uses
bull two controller chassis called the redundant chassis pair Each chassis of the pair must contain at least these modules
ndash 1756-L63XT controller
ndash 1756-CN2RXT ControlNet module
ndash 1756-RMXT redundancy module
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
For more information about redundancy control refer to the ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
IMPORTANT If you are using the 1756-CN2RXT in a redundant system these hardware considerations must be made
bull Each redundant chassis of the pair must be configured with identical modules placed in identical slots These module pairings between the two chassis are called partners
bull All partner modules in redundant chassis pairs must be at the same firmware revision
bull For ControlNet module partners the ControlNet network address must be the same for each module of the pair
bull These modules cannot be used in redundant chassis pairs that contain 1756-CN2RXT modules
ndash 1756-DHRIOXT or 1756-DHRIO
ndash 1756-SRM
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Example Redundant ControlLogix-XT System
This example of a redundant ControlLogix-XT system shows the chassis components listed in this table
Before You BeginBefore you install your module complete these tasks
bull Obtain Appropriate Parts page 11
bull Set the Modulersquos Network Address page 11
bull Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation page 13
bull Determine the Module Slot Location page 13
This chassis Contains these modules
Primary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Secondary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
Redundant ControlNet Media
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 11
PartsTo use your ControlNet module you need these system components
Set the Modulersquos Network AddressUse a small screwdriver to set the modulersquos network address switches For modules in a standalone chassis you must specify a unique ControlNet network address You can select an address of 0199 for modules in a standalone chassis Address 00 is an invalid ControlNet address
This example shows the network address switches set to 23
XTX
TXTX
TXT
-1756-CN2RXT
1756-A5XT or 1756-A7LXT1756-PBXT
1786-TPR 1786-TPS 1786-TPYR or 1786-TPYS
Top of Module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Reset the Module to the Original Factory SettingsIf you need to reset the module to its original settings and clear all keeper information complete the following steps
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Reset the switches to 00
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassis
6 After the module status display reads lsquoReset Complete-Change Switch Settingsrsquo remove power from the chassis
7 Remove the module from the chassis
8 Set the switches to their final value
9 Replace the module in the chassis
10 Apply power to the chassis
IMPORTANT The following procedure instructs you to remove power from the chassis before removing the module This is only necessary if the module is in a Class I Division 2 hazardous location For more information see Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) on page 14
IMPORTANT Do not use the 00 switch setting during normal module operation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 5
European Hazardous Location Approval
European Zone 2 Certification (The following applies when the product bears the Ex or EEx Marking)
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 949EC and has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0
WARNING bull This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments
bull This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Allen-Bradley
bull Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40 when applied in Zone 2 environments
bull This equipment must be used only with ATEX certified backplanes
bull Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product
bull Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous
ATTENTION
This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
6 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet ModuleConfigure and use the 1756-CN2RXT module as you would a traditional 1756-CN2RB module For more information about configuring and using the 1756-CN2RXT and 1756-CN2RB modules see the ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment
bull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static
bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap
bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards
bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment
bull Use a static-safe workstation if available
bull Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 7
Features of the 1756-CN2RXT Module
These are the hardware features of the 1756-CN2RXT module
Item Description
1 Module status display - an alphanumeric display that indicates module status
2 Status indicators that show channel and module status
3 USB port for temporary connection
4 Channel A BNC connector
5 Channel B BNC connector
6 Backplane connector
00 - Factory Reseton Power Up(Invalid Network Address)
01 - 99 Normal Operation(Valid Network Address)
12
3
45
6
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
About ControlLogix-XT SystemsThe ControlLogix-XT products include control and communication system components that when used with FLEX IO-XT products provide a complete control system solution that can be used in environments where temperatures range from -2070 degC (-4158 degF)
When used independently the ControlLogix-XT system can withstand environments where the temperature ranges from -2570 degC (-13158 degF)
ControlLogix-XT with Traditional ControlLogix Components
For more information about standard ControlLogix component specifications and installation requirements see the resources listed in the Additional Resources table on page 35
IMPORTANT ControlLogix-XT system components are rated for extreme environmental conditions only when used properly with other Logix-XT system components The use of ControlLogix-XT components with traditional ControlLogix system components nullifies extreme-environment ratings
If a ControlLogix-XT module is used with traditional ControlLogix products that is ControlLogix products not designed for extreme environments the ControlLogix-XT module can withstand only the environments specified for the traditional ControlLogix version of the module For example if a 1756-CN2RXT module is used in a traditional 1756-A10 chassis the 1756-CN2RXT module can withstand only the environment specified for the traditional 1756-CN2RB module
The ControlLogix-XT system components are designed to meet the same and greater operational and environmental requirements as traditional ControlLogix products
When a ControlLogix-XT component is used as a replacement for a traditional ControlLogix component the functional and environmental requirements of the traditional ControlLogix component apply
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 9
Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant ControlYou can use the 1756-CN2RXT modules either in standalone or redundant configurations
A standalone configuration uses
bull one control chassis that contains the 1756-CN2RXT and the 1756-L63XT controller
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
A redundant configuration uses
bull two controller chassis called the redundant chassis pair Each chassis of the pair must contain at least these modules
ndash 1756-L63XT controller
ndash 1756-CN2RXT ControlNet module
ndash 1756-RMXT redundancy module
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
For more information about redundancy control refer to the ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
IMPORTANT If you are using the 1756-CN2RXT in a redundant system these hardware considerations must be made
bull Each redundant chassis of the pair must be configured with identical modules placed in identical slots These module pairings between the two chassis are called partners
bull All partner modules in redundant chassis pairs must be at the same firmware revision
bull For ControlNet module partners the ControlNet network address must be the same for each module of the pair
bull These modules cannot be used in redundant chassis pairs that contain 1756-CN2RXT modules
ndash 1756-DHRIOXT or 1756-DHRIO
ndash 1756-SRM
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Example Redundant ControlLogix-XT System
This example of a redundant ControlLogix-XT system shows the chassis components listed in this table
Before You BeginBefore you install your module complete these tasks
bull Obtain Appropriate Parts page 11
bull Set the Modulersquos Network Address page 11
bull Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation page 13
bull Determine the Module Slot Location page 13
This chassis Contains these modules
Primary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Secondary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
Redundant ControlNet Media
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 11
PartsTo use your ControlNet module you need these system components
Set the Modulersquos Network AddressUse a small screwdriver to set the modulersquos network address switches For modules in a standalone chassis you must specify a unique ControlNet network address You can select an address of 0199 for modules in a standalone chassis Address 00 is an invalid ControlNet address
This example shows the network address switches set to 23
XTX
TXTX
TXT
-1756-CN2RXT
1756-A5XT or 1756-A7LXT1756-PBXT
1786-TPR 1786-TPS 1786-TPYR or 1786-TPYS
Top of Module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Reset the Module to the Original Factory SettingsIf you need to reset the module to its original settings and clear all keeper information complete the following steps
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Reset the switches to 00
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassis
6 After the module status display reads lsquoReset Complete-Change Switch Settingsrsquo remove power from the chassis
7 Remove the module from the chassis
8 Set the switches to their final value
9 Replace the module in the chassis
10 Apply power to the chassis
IMPORTANT The following procedure instructs you to remove power from the chassis before removing the module This is only necessary if the module is in a Class I Division 2 hazardous location For more information see Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) on page 14
IMPORTANT Do not use the 00 switch setting during normal module operation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
6 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet ModuleConfigure and use the 1756-CN2RXT module as you would a traditional 1756-CN2RB module For more information about configuring and using the 1756-CN2RXT and 1756-CN2RB modules see the ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment
bull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static
bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap
bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards
bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment
bull Use a static-safe workstation if available
bull Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 7
Features of the 1756-CN2RXT Module
These are the hardware features of the 1756-CN2RXT module
Item Description
1 Module status display - an alphanumeric display that indicates module status
2 Status indicators that show channel and module status
3 USB port for temporary connection
4 Channel A BNC connector
5 Channel B BNC connector
6 Backplane connector
00 - Factory Reseton Power Up(Invalid Network Address)
01 - 99 Normal Operation(Valid Network Address)
12
3
45
6
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
About ControlLogix-XT SystemsThe ControlLogix-XT products include control and communication system components that when used with FLEX IO-XT products provide a complete control system solution that can be used in environments where temperatures range from -2070 degC (-4158 degF)
When used independently the ControlLogix-XT system can withstand environments where the temperature ranges from -2570 degC (-13158 degF)
ControlLogix-XT with Traditional ControlLogix Components
For more information about standard ControlLogix component specifications and installation requirements see the resources listed in the Additional Resources table on page 35
IMPORTANT ControlLogix-XT system components are rated for extreme environmental conditions only when used properly with other Logix-XT system components The use of ControlLogix-XT components with traditional ControlLogix system components nullifies extreme-environment ratings
If a ControlLogix-XT module is used with traditional ControlLogix products that is ControlLogix products not designed for extreme environments the ControlLogix-XT module can withstand only the environments specified for the traditional ControlLogix version of the module For example if a 1756-CN2RXT module is used in a traditional 1756-A10 chassis the 1756-CN2RXT module can withstand only the environment specified for the traditional 1756-CN2RB module
The ControlLogix-XT system components are designed to meet the same and greater operational and environmental requirements as traditional ControlLogix products
When a ControlLogix-XT component is used as a replacement for a traditional ControlLogix component the functional and environmental requirements of the traditional ControlLogix component apply
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 9
Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant ControlYou can use the 1756-CN2RXT modules either in standalone or redundant configurations
A standalone configuration uses
bull one control chassis that contains the 1756-CN2RXT and the 1756-L63XT controller
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
A redundant configuration uses
bull two controller chassis called the redundant chassis pair Each chassis of the pair must contain at least these modules
ndash 1756-L63XT controller
ndash 1756-CN2RXT ControlNet module
ndash 1756-RMXT redundancy module
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
For more information about redundancy control refer to the ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
IMPORTANT If you are using the 1756-CN2RXT in a redundant system these hardware considerations must be made
bull Each redundant chassis of the pair must be configured with identical modules placed in identical slots These module pairings between the two chassis are called partners
bull All partner modules in redundant chassis pairs must be at the same firmware revision
bull For ControlNet module partners the ControlNet network address must be the same for each module of the pair
bull These modules cannot be used in redundant chassis pairs that contain 1756-CN2RXT modules
ndash 1756-DHRIOXT or 1756-DHRIO
ndash 1756-SRM
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Example Redundant ControlLogix-XT System
This example of a redundant ControlLogix-XT system shows the chassis components listed in this table
Before You BeginBefore you install your module complete these tasks
bull Obtain Appropriate Parts page 11
bull Set the Modulersquos Network Address page 11
bull Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation page 13
bull Determine the Module Slot Location page 13
This chassis Contains these modules
Primary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Secondary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
Redundant ControlNet Media
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 11
PartsTo use your ControlNet module you need these system components
Set the Modulersquos Network AddressUse a small screwdriver to set the modulersquos network address switches For modules in a standalone chassis you must specify a unique ControlNet network address You can select an address of 0199 for modules in a standalone chassis Address 00 is an invalid ControlNet address
This example shows the network address switches set to 23
XTX
TXTX
TXT
-1756-CN2RXT
1756-A5XT or 1756-A7LXT1756-PBXT
1786-TPR 1786-TPS 1786-TPYR or 1786-TPYS
Top of Module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Reset the Module to the Original Factory SettingsIf you need to reset the module to its original settings and clear all keeper information complete the following steps
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Reset the switches to 00
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassis
6 After the module status display reads lsquoReset Complete-Change Switch Settingsrsquo remove power from the chassis
7 Remove the module from the chassis
8 Set the switches to their final value
9 Replace the module in the chassis
10 Apply power to the chassis
IMPORTANT The following procedure instructs you to remove power from the chassis before removing the module This is only necessary if the module is in a Class I Division 2 hazardous location For more information see Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) on page 14
IMPORTANT Do not use the 00 switch setting during normal module operation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 7
Features of the 1756-CN2RXT Module
These are the hardware features of the 1756-CN2RXT module
Item Description
1 Module status display - an alphanumeric display that indicates module status
2 Status indicators that show channel and module status
3 USB port for temporary connection
4 Channel A BNC connector
5 Channel B BNC connector
6 Backplane connector
00 - Factory Reseton Power Up(Invalid Network Address)
01 - 99 Normal Operation(Valid Network Address)
12
3
45
6
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
About ControlLogix-XT SystemsThe ControlLogix-XT products include control and communication system components that when used with FLEX IO-XT products provide a complete control system solution that can be used in environments where temperatures range from -2070 degC (-4158 degF)
When used independently the ControlLogix-XT system can withstand environments where the temperature ranges from -2570 degC (-13158 degF)
ControlLogix-XT with Traditional ControlLogix Components
For more information about standard ControlLogix component specifications and installation requirements see the resources listed in the Additional Resources table on page 35
IMPORTANT ControlLogix-XT system components are rated for extreme environmental conditions only when used properly with other Logix-XT system components The use of ControlLogix-XT components with traditional ControlLogix system components nullifies extreme-environment ratings
If a ControlLogix-XT module is used with traditional ControlLogix products that is ControlLogix products not designed for extreme environments the ControlLogix-XT module can withstand only the environments specified for the traditional ControlLogix version of the module For example if a 1756-CN2RXT module is used in a traditional 1756-A10 chassis the 1756-CN2RXT module can withstand only the environment specified for the traditional 1756-CN2RB module
The ControlLogix-XT system components are designed to meet the same and greater operational and environmental requirements as traditional ControlLogix products
When a ControlLogix-XT component is used as a replacement for a traditional ControlLogix component the functional and environmental requirements of the traditional ControlLogix component apply
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 9
Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant ControlYou can use the 1756-CN2RXT modules either in standalone or redundant configurations
A standalone configuration uses
bull one control chassis that contains the 1756-CN2RXT and the 1756-L63XT controller
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
A redundant configuration uses
bull two controller chassis called the redundant chassis pair Each chassis of the pair must contain at least these modules
ndash 1756-L63XT controller
ndash 1756-CN2RXT ControlNet module
ndash 1756-RMXT redundancy module
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
For more information about redundancy control refer to the ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
IMPORTANT If you are using the 1756-CN2RXT in a redundant system these hardware considerations must be made
bull Each redundant chassis of the pair must be configured with identical modules placed in identical slots These module pairings between the two chassis are called partners
bull All partner modules in redundant chassis pairs must be at the same firmware revision
bull For ControlNet module partners the ControlNet network address must be the same for each module of the pair
bull These modules cannot be used in redundant chassis pairs that contain 1756-CN2RXT modules
ndash 1756-DHRIOXT or 1756-DHRIO
ndash 1756-SRM
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Example Redundant ControlLogix-XT System
This example of a redundant ControlLogix-XT system shows the chassis components listed in this table
Before You BeginBefore you install your module complete these tasks
bull Obtain Appropriate Parts page 11
bull Set the Modulersquos Network Address page 11
bull Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation page 13
bull Determine the Module Slot Location page 13
This chassis Contains these modules
Primary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Secondary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
Redundant ControlNet Media
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 11
PartsTo use your ControlNet module you need these system components
Set the Modulersquos Network AddressUse a small screwdriver to set the modulersquos network address switches For modules in a standalone chassis you must specify a unique ControlNet network address You can select an address of 0199 for modules in a standalone chassis Address 00 is an invalid ControlNet address
This example shows the network address switches set to 23
XTX
TXTX
TXT
-1756-CN2RXT
1756-A5XT or 1756-A7LXT1756-PBXT
1786-TPR 1786-TPS 1786-TPYR or 1786-TPYS
Top of Module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Reset the Module to the Original Factory SettingsIf you need to reset the module to its original settings and clear all keeper information complete the following steps
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Reset the switches to 00
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassis
6 After the module status display reads lsquoReset Complete-Change Switch Settingsrsquo remove power from the chassis
7 Remove the module from the chassis
8 Set the switches to their final value
9 Replace the module in the chassis
10 Apply power to the chassis
IMPORTANT The following procedure instructs you to remove power from the chassis before removing the module This is only necessary if the module is in a Class I Division 2 hazardous location For more information see Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) on page 14
IMPORTANT Do not use the 00 switch setting during normal module operation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
8 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
About ControlLogix-XT SystemsThe ControlLogix-XT products include control and communication system components that when used with FLEX IO-XT products provide a complete control system solution that can be used in environments where temperatures range from -2070 degC (-4158 degF)
When used independently the ControlLogix-XT system can withstand environments where the temperature ranges from -2570 degC (-13158 degF)
ControlLogix-XT with Traditional ControlLogix Components
For more information about standard ControlLogix component specifications and installation requirements see the resources listed in the Additional Resources table on page 35
IMPORTANT ControlLogix-XT system components are rated for extreme environmental conditions only when used properly with other Logix-XT system components The use of ControlLogix-XT components with traditional ControlLogix system components nullifies extreme-environment ratings
If a ControlLogix-XT module is used with traditional ControlLogix products that is ControlLogix products not designed for extreme environments the ControlLogix-XT module can withstand only the environments specified for the traditional ControlLogix version of the module For example if a 1756-CN2RXT module is used in a traditional 1756-A10 chassis the 1756-CN2RXT module can withstand only the environment specified for the traditional 1756-CN2RB module
The ControlLogix-XT system components are designed to meet the same and greater operational and environmental requirements as traditional ControlLogix products
When a ControlLogix-XT component is used as a replacement for a traditional ControlLogix component the functional and environmental requirements of the traditional ControlLogix component apply
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 9
Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant ControlYou can use the 1756-CN2RXT modules either in standalone or redundant configurations
A standalone configuration uses
bull one control chassis that contains the 1756-CN2RXT and the 1756-L63XT controller
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
A redundant configuration uses
bull two controller chassis called the redundant chassis pair Each chassis of the pair must contain at least these modules
ndash 1756-L63XT controller
ndash 1756-CN2RXT ControlNet module
ndash 1756-RMXT redundancy module
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
For more information about redundancy control refer to the ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
IMPORTANT If you are using the 1756-CN2RXT in a redundant system these hardware considerations must be made
bull Each redundant chassis of the pair must be configured with identical modules placed in identical slots These module pairings between the two chassis are called partners
bull All partner modules in redundant chassis pairs must be at the same firmware revision
bull For ControlNet module partners the ControlNet network address must be the same for each module of the pair
bull These modules cannot be used in redundant chassis pairs that contain 1756-CN2RXT modules
ndash 1756-DHRIOXT or 1756-DHRIO
ndash 1756-SRM
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Example Redundant ControlLogix-XT System
This example of a redundant ControlLogix-XT system shows the chassis components listed in this table
Before You BeginBefore you install your module complete these tasks
bull Obtain Appropriate Parts page 11
bull Set the Modulersquos Network Address page 11
bull Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation page 13
bull Determine the Module Slot Location page 13
This chassis Contains these modules
Primary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Secondary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
Redundant ControlNet Media
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 11
PartsTo use your ControlNet module you need these system components
Set the Modulersquos Network AddressUse a small screwdriver to set the modulersquos network address switches For modules in a standalone chassis you must specify a unique ControlNet network address You can select an address of 0199 for modules in a standalone chassis Address 00 is an invalid ControlNet address
This example shows the network address switches set to 23
XTX
TXTX
TXT
-1756-CN2RXT
1756-A5XT or 1756-A7LXT1756-PBXT
1786-TPR 1786-TPS 1786-TPYR or 1786-TPYS
Top of Module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Reset the Module to the Original Factory SettingsIf you need to reset the module to its original settings and clear all keeper information complete the following steps
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Reset the switches to 00
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassis
6 After the module status display reads lsquoReset Complete-Change Switch Settingsrsquo remove power from the chassis
7 Remove the module from the chassis
8 Set the switches to their final value
9 Replace the module in the chassis
10 Apply power to the chassis
IMPORTANT The following procedure instructs you to remove power from the chassis before removing the module This is only necessary if the module is in a Class I Division 2 hazardous location For more information see Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) on page 14
IMPORTANT Do not use the 00 switch setting during normal module operation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 9
Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant ControlYou can use the 1756-CN2RXT modules either in standalone or redundant configurations
A standalone configuration uses
bull one control chassis that contains the 1756-CN2RXT and the 1756-L63XT controller
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
A redundant configuration uses
bull two controller chassis called the redundant chassis pair Each chassis of the pair must contain at least these modules
ndash 1756-L63XT controller
ndash 1756-CN2RXT ControlNet module
ndash 1756-RMXT redundancy module
bull one or both channels of the 1756-CN2RXT module connected to the ControlNet network
For more information about redundancy control refer to the ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
IMPORTANT If you are using the 1756-CN2RXT in a redundant system these hardware considerations must be made
bull Each redundant chassis of the pair must be configured with identical modules placed in identical slots These module pairings between the two chassis are called partners
bull All partner modules in redundant chassis pairs must be at the same firmware revision
bull For ControlNet module partners the ControlNet network address must be the same for each module of the pair
bull These modules cannot be used in redundant chassis pairs that contain 1756-CN2RXT modules
ndash 1756-DHRIOXT or 1756-DHRIO
ndash 1756-SRM
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Example Redundant ControlLogix-XT System
This example of a redundant ControlLogix-XT system shows the chassis components listed in this table
Before You BeginBefore you install your module complete these tasks
bull Obtain Appropriate Parts page 11
bull Set the Modulersquos Network Address page 11
bull Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation page 13
bull Determine the Module Slot Location page 13
This chassis Contains these modules
Primary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Secondary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
Redundant ControlNet Media
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 11
PartsTo use your ControlNet module you need these system components
Set the Modulersquos Network AddressUse a small screwdriver to set the modulersquos network address switches For modules in a standalone chassis you must specify a unique ControlNet network address You can select an address of 0199 for modules in a standalone chassis Address 00 is an invalid ControlNet address
This example shows the network address switches set to 23
XTX
TXTX
TXT
-1756-CN2RXT
1756-A5XT or 1756-A7LXT1756-PBXT
1786-TPR 1786-TPS 1786-TPYR or 1786-TPYS
Top of Module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Reset the Module to the Original Factory SettingsIf you need to reset the module to its original settings and clear all keeper information complete the following steps
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Reset the switches to 00
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassis
6 After the module status display reads lsquoReset Complete-Change Switch Settingsrsquo remove power from the chassis
7 Remove the module from the chassis
8 Set the switches to their final value
9 Replace the module in the chassis
10 Apply power to the chassis
IMPORTANT The following procedure instructs you to remove power from the chassis before removing the module This is only necessary if the module is in a Class I Division 2 hazardous location For more information see Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) on page 14
IMPORTANT Do not use the 00 switch setting during normal module operation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
10 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Example Redundant ControlLogix-XT System
This example of a redundant ControlLogix-XT system shows the chassis components listed in this table
Before You BeginBefore you install your module complete these tasks
bull Obtain Appropriate Parts page 11
bull Set the Modulersquos Network Address page 11
bull Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation page 13
bull Determine the Module Slot Location page 13
This chassis Contains these modules
Primary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Secondary chassis 1756-A5XT 1756-PBXT 1756-L63XT 1756-RMXT 1756-CN2RXT
Primary Chassis
Secondary Chassis
Redundant ControlNet Media
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
To Remote IO
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 11
PartsTo use your ControlNet module you need these system components
Set the Modulersquos Network AddressUse a small screwdriver to set the modulersquos network address switches For modules in a standalone chassis you must specify a unique ControlNet network address You can select an address of 0199 for modules in a standalone chassis Address 00 is an invalid ControlNet address
This example shows the network address switches set to 23
XTX
TXTX
TXT
-1756-CN2RXT
1756-A5XT or 1756-A7LXT1756-PBXT
1786-TPR 1786-TPS 1786-TPYR or 1786-TPYS
Top of Module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Reset the Module to the Original Factory SettingsIf you need to reset the module to its original settings and clear all keeper information complete the following steps
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Reset the switches to 00
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassis
6 After the module status display reads lsquoReset Complete-Change Switch Settingsrsquo remove power from the chassis
7 Remove the module from the chassis
8 Set the switches to their final value
9 Replace the module in the chassis
10 Apply power to the chassis
IMPORTANT The following procedure instructs you to remove power from the chassis before removing the module This is only necessary if the module is in a Class I Division 2 hazardous location For more information see Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) on page 14
IMPORTANT Do not use the 00 switch setting during normal module operation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 11
PartsTo use your ControlNet module you need these system components
Set the Modulersquos Network AddressUse a small screwdriver to set the modulersquos network address switches For modules in a standalone chassis you must specify a unique ControlNet network address You can select an address of 0199 for modules in a standalone chassis Address 00 is an invalid ControlNet address
This example shows the network address switches set to 23
XTX
TXTX
TXT
-1756-CN2RXT
1756-A5XT or 1756-A7LXT1756-PBXT
1786-TPR 1786-TPS 1786-TPYR or 1786-TPYS
Top of Module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Reset the Module to the Original Factory SettingsIf you need to reset the module to its original settings and clear all keeper information complete the following steps
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Reset the switches to 00
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassis
6 After the module status display reads lsquoReset Complete-Change Switch Settingsrsquo remove power from the chassis
7 Remove the module from the chassis
8 Set the switches to their final value
9 Replace the module in the chassis
10 Apply power to the chassis
IMPORTANT The following procedure instructs you to remove power from the chassis before removing the module This is only necessary if the module is in a Class I Division 2 hazardous location For more information see Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) on page 14
IMPORTANT Do not use the 00 switch setting during normal module operation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
12 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Reset the Module to the Original Factory SettingsIf you need to reset the module to its original settings and clear all keeper information complete the following steps
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Reset the switches to 00
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassis
6 After the module status display reads lsquoReset Complete-Change Switch Settingsrsquo remove power from the chassis
7 Remove the module from the chassis
8 Set the switches to their final value
9 Replace the module in the chassis
10 Apply power to the chassis
IMPORTANT The following procedure instructs you to remove power from the chassis before removing the module This is only necessary if the module is in a Class I Division 2 hazardous location For more information see Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) on page 14
IMPORTANT Do not use the 00 switch setting during normal module operation
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 13
Prepare the Chassis for Module InstallationComplete these tasks using the resources listed as references before you install your ControlNet module
Determine the Module Slot Location
When installing your ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface module remember that you can install
bull a 1756-CN2RXT module in any open slot of the chassis
bull multiple 1756-CN2RXT modules in the same chassis
bull as many modules as your power supply can accommodate that is the number for which the power supply is rated
Task Resource
Install a ControlLogix-XT chassis ControlLogix-XT Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Install a ControlLogix-XT power supply ControlLogix-XT Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
14 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Install the ControlNet ModuleTo install the module perform this procedure
1 Align the circuit board with top and bottom guides in the chassis
2 Slide the module into the chassis
WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 15
3 Make sure the module backplane connector properly connects to the chassis backplane
The module is properly installed when it is flush with the power supply or other installed modules
ATTENTION Do not force the module into the backplane connector If you cannot seat the module with firm pressure check the alignment Forcing the module into the chassis can damage the backplane connector or the module
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
16 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Connect the Module to the Network
Connect the module to the ControlNet network by using one of these taps
However taps with a straight connector (catalog numbers 1786-TPS and 1786-TPYS) are recommended because the BNC connectors are located on the bottom of the module
To connect the module to the network with a tap perform this procedure
1 Remove and save the dust caps from the ControlNet taps
WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
bull 1786-TPR bull 1786-TPYS
bull 1786-TPS bull 1786-TCT2BD1
bull 1786-TPYR
ATTENTION Do not allow any metal portions of the tap to contact any conductive material If you disconnect the tap from the module place the dust cap back on the straight or right-angle connector to prevent the connector from accidentally contacting a metallic grounded surface
Dust Cap
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 17
2 Attach the taprsquos straight or right-angle connector to the appropriate BNC connector on the module
IMPORTANT Avoid accidentally reversing the tap connections Before making your connection check the tap drop cable for the label indicating the attached segment Accidental connection reversals produce incorrect status displays and require troubleshooting
To use modules in a redundant-control chassis pair you must connect the primary and redundant partner modules to the same network segment If you are using redundant media connect the channel of each partner to the same network segment
For trunkline Attach the connector to
A Channel A on the 1756-CN2RXT module
B Channel B on the 1756-CN2RXT module
Tap Tap
B A
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
18 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Apply Power and Check StatusIf not yet applied apply power to the chassis power supply Use this flowchart as a reference to determine module status after power is applied
Turn the chassis power supply on
Module status indicator red
See Status Indicators on page 23
Module performs a self-test initialization
No
Yes
TEST
No
Yes
Module status indicator red
Self-test has failed and the module displays an error message See page 23
Replace the module
Self-test is complete The status indicator flashes green
Channel A and B status indicators alternately flash
Channel A and B status indicators display the network condition as listed on page 29
Module status displays OK
No See the troubleshooting table on page 23
Yes
Module is functional and operating
OK Axx
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 19
Remove the ModuleTo remove the module perform this procedure
1 Push on the upper and lower tabs to disengage them
2 Slide the module out of the chassis
IMPORTANT If you are removing and replacing an existing module with an identical one and you want to resume identical system operation you must install the new module with the same ControlNet address in the same slot
XTX
T
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
20 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Install the EDS FileThe EDS file can be uploaded directly from the module This feature lets you register the EDS file for your module from within RSLinx software by following the steps listed below
1 Open RSLinx software version 255 or later and browse for the module
2 Right-click the module and select Upload EDS file from device
The Upload EDS wizard opens
3 Complete the EDS wizard to register the EDS file
The EDS file can also be downloaded from wwwabcomnetworksedshtml and installed with the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 21
Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB PortThe ControlNet interface module has a USB device port that uses a Type B receptacle The port is USB 11-compatible and runs at 12 Mbps To use the USB port of the 1756-CN2RXT you must have RSLinx software version 255 or later installed on your workstation Use a USB cable to connect your workstation to the USB port With this connection you can download programs to controllers and configure other devices which are accessible by the module directly from your workstation
WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding
A Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to maintain hazardous location certifications
WARNING The 1756-CN2RXT modules series B have an industrial Type B USB port The port has the same electrical characteristics as other Type B ports but a higher cable pull-out rating
For typical applications in nonhazardous environments you may use any high-quality USB cable If used in a hazardous location a Samtec Inc RSP-119350 USB cable is required to meet the 15-Newton pull test for hazardous environments
ATTENTION The USB cable is not to exceed 30 m (984 ft) and must not contain hubs
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
22 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Set Up the USB DriverTo configure RSLinx software to use a USB port first set up a USB driver by performing this procedure
1 Connect your 1756-CN2RXT module to your workstation by installing a USB cable in your modulersquos USB port
The workstation monitor displays the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box
2 Click Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next
The software is installed
3 Click Finish to set up your USB driver
4 To view your 1756-CN2RXT module in RSLinx software click the RSWho button
The RSLinx Workstation organizer appears
Your 1756-CN2RXT module appears under two different drivers a virtual chassis and the USB port You can use either driver to browse through to your ControlNet module
Virtual Chassis Driver
USB Port Driver
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 23
Status IndicatorsThe ControlLogix-XT ControlNet module has these status indicators
Module Status Indicator and Display
The Module Status indicator and Module Status display provide diagnostic information Use this table to interpret the Module Status Indicator and Display
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Off None The module is not communicating due to a power supply fault or internal fault
1 Check the power supply2 Check the cable connectors3 Make sure the module is
firmly seated in the chassis4 If the indicator remains off
replace the module
Module Status Display
Module Status IndicatorChannel Status Indicators
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
24 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Red Reset Complete- Change Switch Settings
Modulersquos network address is set to 00 an invalid ControlNet address
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFAIL This code is displayed when
the power-up test failsReplace the module
Backplane
Init(1)The module is waiting for the redundant module to complete power up
None required
Stop Service Received
A non-redundant module is placed into a redundant secondary chassis The module was commanded to stop functioning by the redundancy module (RMSRM)
1 Remove the non-redundant module from the redundant secondary chassis
2 Replace the non-redundant module with the redundant module
This could occur if a 1756-CN2RXT module running Boot code is inserted into a chassis along with a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
For redundant control the 1756-CN2RXT module is to be used with a 1756-RM module It should not be used with a 1756-SRM module
1 Insert the module into a chassis that does not contain a 1756-SRM or 1756-RM module
2 Update the modulersquos firmware using ControlFlash software
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 25
Flashing red
Image update Needed
Boot image running Main firmware image needs to be updated
Update the modulersquos firmware by using the ControlFlash utility
DUPLICATE NODE DETECTED
The modulersquos network address is the same as another modulersquos on the link
1 Remove power from the chassis
2 Remove the module from the chassis
3 Set the switches to their final value See page 11
4 Replace the module in the chassis
5 Apply power to the chassisFlash in progress
Flash update is in progress No action is requiredIf communication to the module is lost during a Flash Update this message will continue to be displayed even though the module will not be able to finish the update
You must remove power from the module to recover and then flash again
TEST Module is executing a power-up test
No action is required
If the display persists for more than 45 seconds replace the module because it has failed
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
26 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Solid green
OK This is normal operation There is at least one connection to or through the module No action is required
INIT Module is initializing No action is requiredPASS This message is displayed
momentarily upon completion of a successful power-up test
No action is required
CMPT(1) The secondary module is compatible with its partner
No action is required
DSNP(1) The secondary module is disqualified with no partner
Check the corresponding slot of the primary chassis for the module type and revision
PwDS(1) The module is primary with a disqualified secondary partner
Check the type and revision of the 1756-CN2RXT module
PQgS(1) The module is primary with a qualifying secondary partner
Redundant system status No action is required
PwQS(1) The module is primary with a qualified secondary partner
PwNS(1) The module is primary with no secondary partner
Check corresponding slot of secondary chassis for correct module
QgS(1) The secondary module is qualifying
Redundant system status No action is required
QS(1) The secondary module is qualified
AXX This message is the node address where XX is an address from 0199
No action is required
MACID SWITCH ERROR
Node address switch changed after you cycled power
No action is required but we recommend that you either return switches to their original settings or replace the module since this could indicate a latent hardware anomaly
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 27
Solid or flashing green
CPU=XX This message is the CPU utilization rate where XX is the amount of CPU used ranging from 099 This message occurs only if the CPU utilization exceeds 80
No action is required
OK Module is operating normally No action is requiredFlashing green
OK This is normal operation No connections to or through the module exist No action is required
Invalid Network Configuration
ControlNet configuration error Recheck configuration Verify that the modulersquos network address is less than or equal to the maximum unscheduled network address (UMAX)
NET ERR
A network cabling error exists or there are no other active nodes on the network
Recheck your network cabling and make sure another node on the network is active (online)
Rev XXXX When you start the module its major and minor revisions are disclosed causing this message to briefly appear
The display shows these revisions where the major revision appears to the left of the decimal point and the minor revision to the right
No action is required
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
28 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Any Keeper Unconfigured
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object has been erased or corrupted
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (data format changed)
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object is in a format incompatible with the current revision of firmware
Perform any of these steps
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (slot changed)
After the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded the module was moved to a different spot in the chassis
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the module to the proper slot
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper Unconfigured (net address changed)
The network address switches on the module have been changed since the keeper objectrsquos network-configuration data was downloaded
Perform any of these steps
middot Return the network address switches to their original setting
middot Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
middot See Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 29
Channel Status Indicators
The ControlNet channel status indicators appear in one of these states
bull Steady - status indicator is on continuously in the defined state
bull Alternating - while viewed together the two indicators simultaneously alternate between the two defined states The two indicators are always in opposite states out of phase
bull Flashing - when each status indicator is viewed apart from the other each status indicator alternates between the two defined states If both indicators are flashing they must flash together in phase
Any (cont)
Keeper Signature Mismatch
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration
There is a valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module or see Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings on page 12
Keeper None Valid on Network
The network configuration data maintained in flash memory by the keeper object does not match the current network configuration and there is no valid master keeper on the network
Use RSNetWorx software to download or update the keeper object in the module
Important The Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings procedure on page 12 will not work because there is no valid master keeper from which to crossload data
(1) Messages are for redundant control
OK Indicator
Display Cause Recommended Action
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
30 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
ControlNet Indicator States (A AND B)
State Cause Action
Off There is no power No action is required or apply power
Steady red Unit has faulted Cycle power or reset unit If fault persists contact a Rockwell Automation representative or distributor
Alternating redgreen
A self-test is being conducted No action is required
Alternating redoff
Node has been configured incorrectly
Check network address and other ControlNet configuration parameters
ControlNet Channel Troubleshooting (A OR B)
State Cause Action
Off Channel has been disabled Program network for redundant media if required
Steady green This is normal operation No action is required
Flashing greenoff
Temporary errors exist None unit will self-correct
Node is not configured to go online
Make sure the configuration manager node (keeper) is present and working and the selected address is not greater than the maximum
unscheduled node address (UMAX)(1)
(1) The configuration manager node (keeper) is the node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the network
Flashing redoff A media fault exists Check media for broken cables loose connectors or missing terminators
No other nodes are present on the network
Add other nodes to the network
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 31
General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
ControlNet connectors 2 BNC connectors
Number of ControlNet nodes max 99
ControlNet communication rate 5 MB
USB port USB 11
USB Device USB series B receptacle
USB cable for USB port recommended Samtec cable PN RSP-199350
Connections supported max 131
Note that 3 of the 131 connections are always reserved for redundant control Therefore 128 connections are available for standard use
Weight approx 0293 kg (064 lb)
North American temperature code T4A
IEC temperature code T4
Slot width 1
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
Power consumption max 66 W
Power dissipation max 225 BTUhr
Backplane current 51V DC 13 A 51V dc
Backplane current 24V DC 3 mA 24V dc
Isolation voltage 30V (continuous) Basic Insulation Type
Type tested at 853V AC for 60 s ControlNet to system and ControlNet port to ControlNet port
Wiring category(1)
(1) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
2 - on communication ports
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
32 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Attribute Value
Temperature Operating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)
-25hellip70 degC (-13hellip158 degF)
Temperature Nonoperating
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
-40hellip85 degC (-40hellip185 degF)
Relative Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat)
5hellip95 noncondensing
Vibration
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating)
2 g 10hellip500 Hz
Operating Shock
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
30 g
Shock Non-operating
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged Shock)
50 g
Emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 Class A
ESD Immunity
IEC 61000-4-2
bull 6 kV contact discharges
bull 8 kV air discharges
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 33
Radiated RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
bull10Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 80hellip2000 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz
bull10Vm with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz
bull3Vm with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 2000hellip2700 MHz
EFTB Immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
plusmn2 kV at 5 kHz on ControlNet ports
Surge Transient Immunity
IEC 61000-4-5
plusmn1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports
Conducted RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-6
10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80 AM from 150 kHzhellip80 MHz
Attribute Value
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
34 ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module
Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
Certification(1) (2)
(1) When the product is marked
(2) See the Product Certification link at httpwwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details
Value
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584
UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous Locations certified for US and Canada See UL File E194810
CE European Union 2004108EC EMC Directive compliant with
bullEN 61326-1 MeasControlLab Industrial Requirements
bullEN 61000-6-2 Industrial Immunity
bullEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions
bullEN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers (Clause 8 Zone A amp B)
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 949EC ATEX Directive compliant with
bullEN 60079-15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X)
bullEN 60079-0 General Requirements (Zone 2)
CI ControlNet Intl conformance tested to ControlNet specifications
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module 35
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local sales office or Rockwell Automation distributor
Resource Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Contains general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial automation system
ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET-UM001
Contains information on how to use ControlNet modules with various Logix5000 controllers
ControlLogix-XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN637
Contains information on how to install a ControlLogix-XT chassis
ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN639
Contains information on how to install the ControlLogix-XT power supply
ControlNet Coax Taps Installation Instructions publication 1786-IN007
Contains information on how to install ControlNet coaxial taps
ControlNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN001
Contains procedures and specifications for the installation of ControlNet fiber media components
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Contains general guidelines for the installation of ControlNet coax media
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlFlash ControlLogix ControlLogix-XT FlexIO-XT Logix5000 RSLinx RSLogix 5000 Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Publication 1756-IN634A-EN-P - April 2009 PN-36806 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
- Important User Information
-
- North American Hazardous Location Approval
- European Hazardous Location Approval
- Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
-
- ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions 1756-IN634A-EN-P
- Table of Contents
- About the ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Module
- About ControlLogix-XT Systems
- Using the 1756-CN2RXT for Standalone or Redundant Control
- Before You Begin
- Parts
- Set the Modulersquos Network Address
- Reset the Module to the Original Factory Settings
- Prepare the Chassis for Module Installation
- Determine the Module Slot Location
- Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
- Install the ControlNet Module
- Connect the Module to the Network
- Apply Power and Check Status
- Remove the Module
- Install the EDS File
- Configure RSLinx Software to Use the USB Port
- Set Up the USB Driver
- Status Indicators
- General Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Environmental Specifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Certifications - 1756-CN2RXT
- Additional Resources
- Back Cover
-
Intro
Generic pub print specs
IN RN pub type specs
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) | |||
WIRE O | Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) | |||
Saddle-Stitch Items | ||||
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) | ||||
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover) | ||||
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover) | ||||
All page quantities must be divisible by 4 | ||||
Tape Bound Items | ||||
125 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Perfect Bound Items | ||||
475 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Double Wire Bound Items | ||||
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Coil Bound Items | ||||
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | 1 | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1756-IN634A-EN-P | ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions | EA | 1 | 50 | Marketing Commercial | CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021 | 04062209 | 5 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 4 | 36 | 9 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | BLACK (preferred) | 475 | 7 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black | PN-38606 |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608 |
Generic pub print specs
IN RN pub type specs
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) | |||
WIRE O | Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) | |||
Saddle-Stitch Items | ||||
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) | ||||
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover) | ||||
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover) | ||||
All page quantities must be divisible by 4 | ||||
Tape Bound Items | ||||
125 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Perfect Bound Items | ||||
475 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Double Wire Bound Items | ||||
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Coil Bound Items | ||||
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | 1 | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1756-IN634A-EN-P | ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions | EA | 1 | 50 | Marketing Commercial | CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021 | 04062209 | 5 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 4 | 36 | 9 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | BLACK (preferred) | 475 | 7 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black | PN-38606 |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
IN RN pub type specs
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) | |||
WIRE O | Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) | |||
Saddle-Stitch Items | ||||
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) | ||||
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover) | ||||
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover) | ||||
All page quantities must be divisible by 4 | ||||
Tape Bound Items | ||||
125 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Perfect Bound Items | ||||
475 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Double Wire Bound Items | ||||
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Coil Bound Items | ||||
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | 1 | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1756-IN634A-EN-P | ControlLogix-XT ControlNet Interface Module Installation Instructions | EA | 1 | 50 | Marketing Commercial | CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021 | 04062209 | 5 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 4 | 36 | 9 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | BLACK (preferred) | 475 | 7 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black | PN-38606 |
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) | |||
WIRE O | Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) | |||
Saddle-Stitch Items | ||||
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) | ||||
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover) | ||||
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover) | ||||
All page quantities must be divisible by 4 | ||||
Tape Bound Items | ||||
125 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Perfect Bound Items | ||||
475 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Double Wire Bound Items | ||||
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Coil Bound Items | ||||
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | 1 | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF |
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) | |||
WIRE O | Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) | |||
Saddle-Stitch Items | ||||
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) | ||||
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover) | ||||
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover) | ||||
All page quantities must be divisible by 4 | ||||
Tape Bound Items | ||||
125 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Perfect Bound Items | ||||
475 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Double Wire Bound Items | ||||
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Coil Bound Items | ||||
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | 1 | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) | |||
WIRE O | Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) | |||
Saddle-Stitch Items | ||||
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) | ||||
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover) | ||||
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover) | ||||
All page quantities must be divisible by 4 | ||||
Tape Bound Items | ||||
125 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Perfect Bound Items | ||||
475 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Double Wire Bound Items | ||||
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Coil Bound Items | ||||
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | 1 | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
Field definitions
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) | |||
WIRE O | Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) | |||
Saddle-Stitch Items | ||||
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) | ||||
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover) | ||||
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover) | ||||
All page quantities must be divisible by 4 | ||||
Tape Bound Items | ||||
125 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Perfect Bound Items | ||||
475 sheets max on 20 no cover | ||||
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Double Wire Bound Items | ||||
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Coil Bound Items | ||||
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) | ||||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | 1 | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |